JP7134884B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values and which can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set set values. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting values, the next process can only be performed when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are finished, and there is a problem that the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing setting confirmation work.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) that can set a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state);
setting confirmation control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes setting value confirmation processing) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state (for example, CPU 103 for timing by an attacker release time timer);
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying display results based on the passage of game media through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
Normal variable display timing means for timing the normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer);
Perform variable display of special identification information (for example, special symbols), special variable display means capable of displaying the variable display result (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
special variable display timing means (for example, CPU 103) for timing a special variable display period during which special identification information is variably displayed;
a predetermined period clock means for timing a predetermined period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game ,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is permitted,
The interrupt processing is permitted after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interruption processing is permitted, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. The timing of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the change period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 sets when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. The timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the confirmation state, and the timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the period ends, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the normal variable display period is resumed (for example, the CPU 103 can be set to the The normal pattern fluctuation time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the special variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the special variable display period is interrupted until it ends, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the special variable display period is resumed (for example, the CPU 103 may To stop the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restart the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the setting confirmation state is controlled, the mode of the special variable display means is set to a mode different from the variable display result ( in the setting value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B to start lighting all segments) ,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the predetermined period is being counted, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is terminated. The timing of the predetermined period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the predetermined period is restarted.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably perform the setting confirmation work in a situation where it is desired to immediately confirm the setting.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) advantageous to a player,
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot game state until the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times, etc.)) Over a specific state (for example, high base state, etc.) controllable state control means (for example, in the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of the special symbol process processing, control to a high base state, time reduction control and high opening control CPU 103 etc. to start),
Determining means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 018AKS108, 018AKS109, etc.) that can determine variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time, etc.),
with
The specific period is the first period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the first to fourth times, etc.), and the first period After the second period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the 5th to 49th times, etc.), and the second period after the second period 3 periods (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special figure or the second special figure is executed, etc.)
The determining means
At a rate higher than the second period in the first period, it is possible to determine the first variable display time (such as the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PC1-1") (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 By executing, when it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "1" to "4" (when it is determined to be the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8 And the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined by referring to the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation is the special figure specified in the determined variation pattern. CPU 103 etc. determined at variable time),
A second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be determined (for example, by performing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, time saving When the number count value is determined to be within the range of "5" to "49" (when determined to be the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9 A CPU 103 that determines a variation pattern of a big hit variation with reference to a big hit variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern, etc.),
A third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, the variation pattern “PB3- 1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be determined (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, time saving number count value When it is determined that is included in the range of "50" to "99" (when it is determined to be the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11 A CPU 103 that determines a variation pattern of a big hit variation with reference to a pattern determination table and determines a special figure variation time of the big hit variation as a special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern, etc.),
moreover,
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled at least to an advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating judgment random numbers for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state. Determining advantageous state determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set value Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is normal state The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a variable state)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the first period, exhilaration is generated to improve the game interest, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state is changed to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the period until the game from being prolonged and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The setting means does not control to the advantageous state during the second period, regardless of the timing during the second period when the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed. In the case, set the time longer than the length of the second period as the variable display time in the second period (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the time reduction number count value is "5" to "49" range (if it is determined to be the second period), the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 8-9 is not executed in the second period, Variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" ~ "PC4-4", "PC5-1" ~ longer than the length of the second period when not controlled to the jackpot gaming state The variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined by referring to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period in which the judgment value is assigned to "PC5-4", and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation is determined. CPU103 etc. to be set to the special figure fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, even if the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed at any timing during the second period, the variable display time in the second period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. time can be secured.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When controlled to the advantageous state in the second period, the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is performed over the first fluctuation period and the second fluctuation period after the first fluctuation period. executable (for example, the jackpot variation performed during the second period can be performed over the first variation period and the second variation period shown in FIG. 8-2, etc.),
It is possible to execute the first notification (for example, derivation of the display result of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, etc.) that suggests whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state in the first fluctuation period,
In the second fluctuation period, unlike the first notification, a second notification related to the advantageous state (for example, a ball-out performance, etc.) can be executed.
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the execution of the first notification suggesting whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state from being prolonged, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. . Furthermore, by executing the second notification in the second fluctuation period after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the game interest can be improved.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The specific period is the fourth period after the third period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the 100th to 150th first special figure or the second special figure is executed) further includes
The setting means sets a fourth variable display time (for example, a first variable display time or a specific variable display time) shorter than at least the third variable display time in the fourth period at a higher rate than in the third period. Can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, if it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "100" to "150" (it is determined to be the fourth period case), determine the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8, and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation such as CPU 103 to set the special figure fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, in the fourth period, it is possible to prevent the period from one advantageous state to the next advantageous state from being prolonged, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
It further comprises detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) capable of detecting the action of the player,
In the second period, it is possible to execute a specific effect using the detection means (for example, a ball-out extra effect, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, by allowing the player to participate in the performance, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and reduce the interest in the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions according to the following means (6) to (26). Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a judgment random number that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state within a predetermined numerical range A numerical value generating means is provided, and based on the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generating means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set in the game machine, whether to control to an advantageous state It is conceivable to determine whether or not, and to vary the probability of controlling to an advantageous state by varying the number of advantageous state determination values for each set value set in the gaming machine. However, in the case where the advantageous condition determination value is set differently for each setting value set in the game machine, if the advantageous condition determination value is set over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for judgment will match the advantageous condition determination value. Since it is necessary to determine whether or not to perform the control for a plurality of times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state increases. It is an object of this invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

(6) The gaming machine described in
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled at least to an advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating judgment random numbers for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state. Determining advantageous state determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set value Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is normal The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a variable state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of (7) is the gaming machine according to (6),
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means,
The advantageous state determination means reads the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41). 207SGS550), the advantageous condition determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is combined with the advantageous condition determination value included in the common numerical range. , is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the random number values for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination match (for example, the CPU 103 performs 207SG556 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41 in the process of 207SG550, the part that sets the display result determination table according to the setting value read out in the process of 207SG550)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advantageous condition determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set each time the advantageous condition determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous condition. It is possible to prevent inappropriate judgments from being made.

The gaming machine of (8) is the gaming machine according to (6) to (7),
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as determined used set value information (for example, the CPU 103 can store the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41). In the process of 207SGS566, the set value set in the process of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value),
A collation capable of collating whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means at predetermined intervals. It is characterized by further comprising means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 compares the set value specified in the process of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value in the process of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 9-41).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous condition determination value is set by inappropriate set value information.

(9) The gaming machine is the gaming machine according to (8),
The collation means performs collation every time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state as the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 performs variable display. The part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 each time it is executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state, the verification is performed, so that it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

(10) The gaming machine is the gaming machine according to (6) to (9),
Error notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120 error notification processing (207SGS439) that can execute error notification that the set value information is abnormal when the result of collation of the collation means is not the same) is executed to display a notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to make those around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value information is abnormal, and to promptly take measures against the abnormal setting value information.

The gaming machine of (11) is the gaming machine according to (6) to (10),
The game control means controls the game to a game disabled state in which the game is disabled when the result of the verification by the verification means is not the same, and outputs error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as a comparison result of 207SGS552, the loop processing is performed) and a part that executes the processing of 207SGS554 and transmits an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the error notification process (207SGS439), from the CPU 103 A portion that determines whether or not an error designation command has been received, and executes error notification in accordance with the received error designation command when an error designation command is received)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of (12) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (11),
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the variable display result determination module is The part that determines the variable display result using
Reservation storage means (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 9-39 for start winning judgment processing) capable of storing the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means as a reservation memory. a part that executes the processing of 207SGS510 in
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state can be determined based on the reserved storage. the part that executes the time random number determination process),
further comprising
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to the advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins The part that determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module in the random value determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the advance determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of (13) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (12),
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means;
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
further comprising
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display result has become a small hit) The part that updates the value of the figure process flag to 8 ″ and controls to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is a common value continuous from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination part set as a common numeric range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and a special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. 9-17 ~ as shown in Figure 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, A part that sets a display result determination table according to the read set value and determines whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic part, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In such a case, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting values specified from these setting value information can be shared, so the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

The gaming machine of (14) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (13),
For the setting value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the pachinko game If the setting value set in machine 1 is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, with respect to the most disadvantageous set value for the player, only the common numerical range of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range may be targeted to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of (15) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (14),
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined as predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means generates a common numerical value range and a non-common numerical value of the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.

The gaming machine of (16) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (15),
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and the probability of determining that the control to the advantageous state is determined is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. A game control that can be controlled to a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is a number or a special state corresponding to a special number that is the number of the advantageous state determination value increased with respect to the normal number based on becoming the advantageous state. Means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value within the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in Figures 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined based on the predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of (17) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (16),
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state when the advantageous state determining means determines to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state when the special state determining means determines to control to the special state Game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, they are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. As shown in 9-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set as a small hit reference value of 32767, which is a common value regardless of the fluctuation special figure. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of (18) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (17),
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be in the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the small hit standard is always 32767 if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a value, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as a small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special condition judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special condition judgment value can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of (19) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (18),
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including an advantage judgment value and a disadvantage judgment value with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 5) for executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG.
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of whether the setting value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state is set so that the second common numerical range is continuous from the value (for example, As shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. And in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1674, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, definite variable state regardless of whether 32767 is always small It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a hit reference value, and if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Regardless of whether The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Furthermore, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since it suffices to specify the same numerical range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous condition determination means generates a common value for the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value. A process of determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once to determine whether to control to an advantageous state based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range. load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to a special state based on the range a plurality of times, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls to an advantageous state based on the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value and the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to be in the special state only once, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of (20) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (19),
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value ( 2 to 6 values excluding 1) is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 9-55 and 9 As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to make the probabilities of the set values different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of (21) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (20),
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Any set value among a plurality of stages of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) value) can be set (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237); A non-common numerical range for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value that is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) ) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 9-55 and 9 As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to make the probabilities of the set values different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of (22) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (21),
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. is set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, FIGS. 9-53 and 9 As shown in -54, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range including 328 consecutive judgment values regardless of the set value. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Especially in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous condition determination value and the numerical value range of the special condition determination value are set continuously, the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination is Whether it is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the value or the special state judgment value (whether it is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or not), the random number for judgment generated by the random number generation means for judgment is the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state determination value, or the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control and the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of (23) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (22),
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same numbers are set so as to form a continuous second common numerical range,
The advantageous condition determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value within the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17, regardless of the set value, Part where the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit The number of determination values included in the numerical range of values is 328, and when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655. The numerical range of the judgment value is a numerical range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. As a hit reference value, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value is within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value, The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the first reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. can be performed, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of (24) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (23),
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 5) for executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG.
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether it is the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 9-17 to 9- 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In a different range, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or game state is normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as a small hit reference value It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Always 32767 small hit reference value The part set as a continuous numerical range from 3267 to 33421 as
The number of special condition determination values is the same number regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit , If the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value that is set, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value, and the fluctuation special figure is the second If it is a special pattern, regardless of the setting value that is set, the part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol If there is, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 328, and if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655 However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the range, with 32767 as a small hit reference value, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, 32767 to 33421 part set in the numerical range of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value, so The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of (25) is the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (24),
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to the value (2 to 6 values excluding 1),
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 9-55 And as shown in FIG. 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. part),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical value In the range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094 part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421 if the variable special pattern is the second special pattern)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of (26) is the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (25),
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 changes the set value shown in the part that performs the processing) and
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) and a non-common numerical range (for example, a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means). numeric range) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 9-55 and As shown in 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value ),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value , In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094 If the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific period related to the characteristic part 018AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a first fluctuation period and a second fluctuation period related to the characteristic part 018AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern based on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variation pattern setting processing concerning characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table for the low base time based on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit variation pattern determination table for the low base time based on the characteristic part 018AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a high base time loss variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic part 018AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot variation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to the 1st period and 4th period based on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period according to the characteristic portion 018AK. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure fluctuation time in the second period according to the characteristic portion 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to the 3rd period which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 018AK. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a special design display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st suspension indicator and a 2nd suspension indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. 4 is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in display contents of a display monitor; It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormal error or recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a diagram. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the holding display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change process, and (B) is when a set value abnormal error occurs, or Shows the change in the display mode of the special pattern display device when the power is restored during the setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state; It is an explanatory diagram showing an initial pattern for each received command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a notification mode when the pachinko game machine is started. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing operation speeds in operations of non-detection operation control and operation control for actual operation confirmation; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the end timing of setting value change and setting value confirmation and the number of executions of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop completion|finish process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the production|presentation control command in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic portion 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 018AK)
Characteristic portion 018AK according to the present embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the characteristic part 018AK, after the end of the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, the high base state (time saving state or variable probability state) as a specific state is configured to be controllable over at least a specific period. ing.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process allows the type of the big hit to be a time-saving state (low probability) that is a high base state after the big hit game state is completed. high base state), or, after the jackpot game state is over, the jackpot type controlled to the probability variable state (high probability high base state), which is a high base state, is determined, the jackpot game state After termination, it is controlled to a high base state for a certain period of time.

In the present embodiment, the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the execution of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure for a specific number of times is set as the specific period. In this embodiment, the specific number of times is set to 150 times. That is, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state, over a period (specific period) until the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed 150 times, it is configured to be controllable to a high base state. It is

The specific period includes a first period, a second period after the first period, a third period after the second period, and a fourth period after the third period. I'm in. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the first to fourth variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed is set as the first period. . Further, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the 5th to 49th times is set as the second period. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state, the period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special symbols or the second special symbols is executed is set as the third period. Further, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the 100th to 150th variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed is set as the fourth period.

Characteristic part 018AK is configured to be able to set a jackpot variation time as a variable display time. The jackpot variation time is the execution time of the variable display of the first special prize or the second special prize when the display result in the special prize game is "big hit". Hereinafter, the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure in which the display result in the special figure game is "big hit" is referred to as "big hit variation". The big hit variation is a variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure that triggers the control to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state. In addition, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure in which the display result in the special figure game is "losing" is referred to as "losing variation".

In the characteristic part 018AK, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation executed during the specific period is set according to which of the first to fourth periods the jackpot variation is executed.

Specifically, a first variable display time is set as a jackpot variation time in a first period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time is set as a jackpot variation time in a second period, and a second variable display time is set as a jackpot variation time. In the third period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time, and in the fourth period, the first variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time. set as In other words, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation performed in the first period is set to the first variable display time, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation performed in the second period is set to the second variable display time, and the second variable display time is set to the second variable display time. The jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation performed in the third period is set as the third variable display time, and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation performed in the fourth period is set as the first variable display time.

In the characteristic part 018AK, by setting the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation according to which one of the first period to the fourth period the jackpot variation is executed, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, the next A period is set until the jackpot game state is controlled. That is, the longer the jackpot variation time, the longer the period from being controlled to the jackpot game state to the next jackpot game state, and the shorter the jackpot variation time, the longer the jackpot change time to the next jackpot after being controlled to the jackpot game state. The period until the game state is controlled is short. Hereinafter, the period from when it is controlled to the big win game state to when it is controlled to the next big win game state is called a big win interval.

As described above, in the first period, the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time (the jackpot variation executed in the first period set the time to the first variable display time). According to such a configuration, by setting the big win interval in the first period to be shorter than the big win intervals in the second and third periods, it is possible to generate a refreshing feeling and improve the amusement of the game.

In the second period, the second variable display time longer than the first variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time (the jackpot variation time executed in the second period is the second variable display time). According to such a configuration, excessive gambling can be suppressed by setting the jackpot interval in the second period longer than the jackpot intervals in the first period and the third period.

In the third period, a third variable display time that is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time (the jackpot variation time that is executed in the third period is 3 variable display time). According to such a configuration, by setting the jackpot interval in the third period to be longer than the jackpot interval in the first period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and the jackpot interval in the third period is set to the third period. By setting it to be shorter than the big win interval in the two periods, it is possible to prevent the big win interval from being elongated and suppress the decline in the game interest.

In the fourth period, the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time (the jackpot variation time executed in the fourth period is the first variable display time). According to such a configuration, by setting the jackpot interval in the fourth period to be shorter than the jackpot intervals in the second and third periods, it is possible to prevent the jackpot interval from being elongated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can do.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in the characteristic portion 018AK, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period and controlled to the big win gaming state, the big hit variation is divided into the first variation period and the first variation period. and for a second variation period later than

In the first fluctuation period, the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed, and as the first notification suggesting whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the display result of the variable display is derived (stopped display) is executed. Further, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the first fluctuation period.

In the second fluctuation period, unlike the first notification, as the second notification related to the jackpot game state, a special effect, that is, a ball-out extra effect is executed. The payout extra performance is a performance suggesting that the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state has increased. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the ball-out extra performance suggesting that the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state controlled based on the jackpot variation has increased. is executed in the second fluctuation period as the second notification.

In the present embodiment, the extra play effect is executed using the push button 31B as a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player. Concretely, when the action of repeatedly hitting the push button 31B as a predetermined action by the player is detected by the push button 31B, the ball-out extra effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the period until the first notification (derivation of the display result of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed It is possible to prevent the delay of the game and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Furthermore, after the first notification is executed in the first variation period, the second notification (balls-out addition performance) is performed in the second variation period, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and reduce the interest in the game by having the player participate in the performance (the performance with the extra balls paid out).

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern related to the characteristic portion 018AK. In each variation pattern, a special figure variation time is designated as a variable display time of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the fixed special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation time specified in one fluctuation pattern is referred to as the special figure fluctuation time of the one fluctuation pattern.

In the characteristic part 018AK, by the variation pattern setting processing executed in step S111 of the special symbol process processing, the variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined to be one of the variation patterns shown in FIG. Time is set. The details of the selection method of the variation pattern will be described later.

The variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-3 will be described below.

Hereinafter, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "loss" is referred to as a "loss variation pattern". The loss variation pattern includes a "non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "non-reach loss variation pattern" and a "non-reach (loss) variation pattern"), which corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "non-reach loss", and a variable A “reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss fluctuation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the display result of the display is “reach loss” is included.

Further, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big win" or a "minor win" is called a "hit variation pattern". The winning variation pattern includes a ``big winning variation pattern'' corresponding to the variable display result of ``big winning'' and a ``minor winning variation pattern'' corresponding to the variable displaying result of ``small winning''.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include the "normal reach fluctuation pattern" in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the "super reach fluctuation pattern" in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. be.

In the characteristic part 018AK, during the variable display of the decoration pattern, as one aspect of the variable display performance, a sliding performance and a pseudo-continuous performance realized by the variable display operation of the decoration pattern can be executed. The variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-3 include variation patterns for executing a sliding effect and a pseudo-continuous effect.

In the sliding effect, the decorative design is changed in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and then a plurality of decorative design display areas (eg, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.). After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative patterns at , a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative pattern display areas that are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decoration pattern display area 5R, either one or both), the decoration patterns are changed again and then stop-displayed, so that the performance display of changing the stop-displayed decoration pattern is performed. In this way, in the sliding effect, after the plurality of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns to the derivation display of the finalized decorative patterns that result in the variable display, the predetermined number of decorative patterns are variable. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state, and when the decorative patterns constituting the non-ready-to-win combination are stopped and displayed without entering the ready-to-win state.

In the pseudo-continuous effect, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game being satisfied once, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and then the fixed decoration that becomes the variable display result. By the time the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed with decorative patterns (for example, predetermined pseudo consecutive chances, etc.). or displayed in all) is temporarily stopped, and then, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a predetermined re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative patterns, is performed. times (eg up to 4 times). The number of times of re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect (number of times of re-variable display) is the same number as the number of times (temporary stop times) of all decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, the number of pseudo-runs in the pseudo-continuous effect is also referred to as the number of pseudo-continuous variations (or the number of pseudo-continues).

Further, the variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-3 include a variation pattern for executing an additional performance for winning balls.

Variation pattern "PA2-1" is a non-reach (losing) variation pattern in which special figure variation time is normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which a sliding effect is executed. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. Also, the variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. It should be noted that the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA2-3" is longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA2-1" because pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

Variation pattern "PA1-1" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which special figure variation time is shortened from variation pattern "PA2-1".

Variation pattern "PA3-1" is a normal reach (losing) variation pattern with a normal length of special figure variation time. Also, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

Variation pattern "PA4-1" is a super reach α (losing) variation pattern with a normal length of special figure variation time. The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. In addition, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. The same applies to other variation patterns in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Also, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

Variation pattern "PA5-1" is a super reach β (losing) variation pattern with a normal length of special figure variation time. The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Also, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (losing) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

Variation pattern "PB3-1" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which special figure variation time is normal length. Also, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

Variation pattern "PB4-1" is a super reach α (jackpot) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normal length. The variation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Also, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

Variation pattern "PB5-1" is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which special figure variation time is normal length. Variation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. Variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Also, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

In the variation pattern “PC1-1”, when the display result of the special game is “big hit”, the fixed decorative symbols that are the big hit combination are displayed on the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols. ", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. That is, the variation pattern "PC1-1", which is an immediate hit variation pattern, does not change the variable display mode of the decorative symbols to the ready-to-win mode when the display result of the special game is "big hit". As a display result of the variable display, it is a variation pattern in which fixed decorative symbols that are a winning combination are displayed in a stationary manner. In addition, in the instant hit variation pattern, the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern may be the ready-to-win mode for an extremely short period of time (for example, 500 ms).

Variation pattern "PC3-1" is a normal reach (jackpot) variation pattern in which special-figure variation time is a normal length, in which extra ball-out performance is executed. Further, the variation pattern “PC3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which a ball-out extra performance is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (performance) is executed once.

Variation pattern "PC4-1" is a super reach α (jackpot) variation pattern in which special-figure variation time is a normal length, in which extra ball-out performance is executed. Variation pattern “PC4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which an extra play effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. The variation pattern “PC4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a ball-out extra effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Also, the variation pattern “PC4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a ball-out extra effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

Variation pattern "PC5-1" is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which special figure variation time is a normal length, in which a payout extra effect is executed. Variation pattern “PC5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which a ball-out extra effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a trick. The variation pattern “PC5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which a ball-out extra effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PC5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which a ball-out extra effect is executed and a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

FIG. 8-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the high base is in progress (step 018AKS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base is in progress by determining whether or not a time saving flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is turned on, for example. Time saving flag, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high base state such as time saving state (low probability high base state) and probability variable state (high probability high base state), time saving control and high opening control are performed While it is set to the ON state corresponding to , it is cleared corresponding to the end of the time reduction control and the high opening control and becomes the OFF state.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot type is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state is completed, or the jackpot game state is determined to be a jackpot type that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end, in the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of the special symbol process processing, it is controlled to a high base state, and time saving control and high open control are started. be done. When time-saving control or high-opening control in the high base state is started, the time-saving flag is set to the ON state, and the time-saving number count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving number counter, is set to the initial value "0". be done. The time-saving number counter is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and indicates the number of variable displays of the first special figure or the second special figure executed during a specific period during which the high base state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. to count. In the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process, when the time saving number count value is other than "150" which is a value corresponding to 150 times which is the specific number of times, the count value is set to 1. By updating by adding and determining whether or not the count value after the addition has become "150", it is determined whether or not to terminate the short-time control and high open control in the high base state. Then, when the time saving frequency count value reaches "150", it is determined to end the high base state, and by clearing the time saving flag, time saving control and high open control are terminated, and the time saving frequency counter is cleared. do.

When it is determined that the game is not in the high base (in the low base) (step 018AKS101; No), for example, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is ON (step 018AKS102). The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination that the display result of the special design and the decorative design is "big hit" in the special design normal processing executed in step S110 of the special design process processing. . On the other hand, the big hit flag is set (for example, special It is cleared in response to the setting for transmitting the effect control command indicating that the display result of the game is a "jackpot" from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12). turned off.

When it is determined that the big hit flag is not on (is off) (step 018AKS102; No), the low base loss variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table used for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS103). ). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108). Numerical data representing the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 when the process of step 018AKS108 is executed.

FIG. 8-5 shows a configuration example of a low-base loss variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic portion 018AK. When the low-base loss variation pattern determination table is set as the table to be used in the processing of step 018AKS103, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern to the low-base loss variation. It is compared with the judgment value set in advance in the pattern determination table. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result as to which of the ranges of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. In the low base loss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns "PA2-1" to "PA2-3", "PA3-1", "PA3-2", "PA4-1" to "PA4-4", Judgment values are assigned to "PA5-1" to "PA5-4". Therefore, when the losing variation pattern determination table for low base is set as the table to be used, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table for low base to determine the variation pattern, Variation patterns "PA2-1" to "PA2-3", "PA3-1", "PA3-2", "PA4-1" to "PA4-4", "PA5-1" to "PA5-4" Decide on one of them.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (step 018AKS102; Yes), the jackpot variation pattern determination table for low base is selected and set as the table used for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS104). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108).

FIG. 8-6 shows a configuration example of a low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table related to the feature part 018AK. When the low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is set as the table to be used in the processing of step 018AKS104, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 sets the variation pattern determination random number MR4 to the low base time jackpot variation pattern. It is compared with the judgment value set in advance in the decision table. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result as to which of the ranges of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. In the low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-4", "PB5-1" to "PB5-4" A judgment value is assigned. Therefore, when the low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is set as the use table, in the process of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 refers to the low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern, Any one of the variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-1” to “PB4-4”, and “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” is determined.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is on a high base (step 018AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 018AKS105).

When it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (step 018AKS105; No), the high base loss variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table used for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS106). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108).

FIG. 8-7 shows a configuration example of a high-base loss variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic portion 018AK. When the high-base loss variation pattern determination table is set as the table to be used in the processing of step 018AKS106, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern to the high-base loss variation. It is compared with the judgment value set in advance in the pattern determination table. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result as to which of the ranges of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. In the losing variation pattern determination table for high base, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern “PA1-1”. Therefore, when the losing variation pattern determination table for high base is set as the table to be used, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table for high base to determine the variation pattern, The variation pattern “PA1-1” is determined.

That is, when the losing variation is executed during the specific period during which the high base state is controlled, the variation pattern of the losing variation is the period in which the losing variation is performed from the first period to the fourth period. Even if there is, it is determined to be the variation pattern "PA1-1". In other words, when the losing variation is executed during the specific period during which the high base state is controlled, the execution time of the losing variation is any period from the first period to the fourth period during which the losing variation is performed. Even if it is, it is set to the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA1-1".

For this reason, the length of the first period to the fourth period when the jackpot variation is not executed in the first period to the fourth period and the jackpot game state is not controlled is the special figure of the variation pattern "PA1-1" Determined based on variable time. For example, when the jackpot variation is not executed in the second period and the jackpot game state is not controlled (the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure performed in the second period was all loss variation case), the length of the second period is 1000 ms, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA1-1", and the number of variable displays of the first special figure or the second special figure performed in the second period. It is determined to be 45000ms which is the product of 45 and 45000ms.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 018AKS105; Yes), based on the time saving number count value, a jackpot variation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to any one of the first period to the fourth period is selected, It is set as a table used for determining fluctuation patterns (step 018AKS107). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108).

Specifically, in the process of step 018AKS107, if it is determined that the time saving frequency count value is included in the range of "1" to "4" (if it is determined to be the first period), and the time saving frequency count When the value is determined to be included in the range of "100" to "150" (when determined to be the fourth period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the first period and the fourth period A pattern determination table is selected. The high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period is a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, and the high base time corresponding to the fourth period It is a jackpot variation pattern determination table.

FIG. 8-8 shows a configuration example of a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period according to the characteristic part 018AK. When the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period is set as the use table in the process of step 018AKS107, in the process of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 generates a random value for determining the variation pattern. MR4 is compared with the determination value set in advance in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result as to which of the ranges of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern.

In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern "PC1-1". Therefore, when the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period is set as the use table, in the process of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 corresponds to the first period and the fourth period The variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern "PC1-1" by referring to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table.

That is, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern " PC1-1", and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PC1-1". The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PC1-1" corresponds to the first variable display time.

In the process of step 018 AKS107, if it is determined that the time saving number count value is included in the range of "5" to "49" (if it is determined to be the second period), the high corresponding to the second period A base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected.

FIG. 8-9 shows a configuration example of a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period according to the feature part 018AK. In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the time saving number count value is in the range of "5" to "9", the range of "10" to "19", and the range of "20" to " 29” range, the range of “30” to “39”, and the range of “40” to “49”, depending on which one is included, the judgment value is assigned to different fluctuation patterns .

When the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period is set as the use table in the process of step 018AKS107, the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern to the second period in the process of step 018AKS108. In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the two periods, it is compared with a judgment value set in advance in association with the range including the time reduction frequency count value. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result as to which of the ranges of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern.

According to such a configuration, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined according to the time saving frequency count value, and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation can be set. can. In other words, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, it depends on the execution timing of the jackpot variation (how many times the jackpot variation is displayed during the specific period in which the jackpot variation is controlled to the high base state). , the variation pattern of the jackpot variation and the jackpot variation time can be set. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation pattern of the big hit variation, and to improve the game amusement.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-9, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the later the execution timing of the jackpot variation (the larger the time saving count value), the shorter the special figure variation time. A variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation.

In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" ~ "PC4-4", "PC5-1" ~ A judgment value is assigned to "PC5-4". Therefore, when the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period is set as the use table, in the process of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 determines the high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the second period. By referring to the table, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" decide which one.

That is, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3- 2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, “PC5-1” to “PC5-4”, and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the characteristic of the determined variation pattern. It is set to the figure fluctuation time. Variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" ~ "PC4-4", "PC5-1" ~ "PC5-4" special figure fluctuation time is the second variable display time Equivalent to.

Variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC4-4", "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", " As shown in FIG. 8-3, PC5-1" to "PC5-4" are all variation patterns in which an extra ball-out effect is executed.

Therefore, in the process of step 018AKS108, depending on the time saving number count value, the variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5 -4" is determined to be the variation pattern, the ball-out extra performance is executed. In other words, when the big win variation is executed in the second period, regardless of the execution timing and variation pattern of the big win variation, the ball-out extra performance is always executed.

As described above, the length of the second period when the jackpot variation is not executed in the second period and the jackpot game state is not controlled is 1000 ms, which is the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA1-1". , 45, which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol or the second special symbol executed in the second period, and 45000 ms, which is the product of this. As shown in FIG. 8-10, the variation patterns "PC3-1" and "PC3-2" to which the determination value is assigned in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9 ”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” are all the length of the second period when not controlled to the jackpot gaming state longer than 45000 ms.

Therefore, in the process of step 018AKS108, depending on the time saving number count value, the variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5 -4" is determined as the variation pattern, the special figure variation time of these variation patterns, which is longer than the length of the second period when not controlled to the jackpot game state, is the jackpot variation time. It is determined. That is, when the big win variation is executed in the second period, regardless of when the big winning variation is executed in the second period, the second period in the case where the big winning game state is not controlled is performed. A time longer than the length of the period is set as the jackpot variation time.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a time equal to or longer than the predetermined time as the jackpot variation time even when the jackpot variation is executed at any timing during the second period.

In the process of step 018AKS107, if it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "50" to "99" (if it is determined to be the third period), the high corresponding to the third period A base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected.

FIG. 8-11 shows a configuration example of a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period according to the feature part 018AK. When the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period is set as the use table in the processing of step 018AKS107, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern to the corresponding It is compared with the judgment value set in advance in the high base time big hit variation pattern decision table corresponding to the third period. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result as to which of the ranges of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern.

In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, determination values are assigned to the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3". there is Therefore, when the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period is set as the use table, in the process of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 determines the high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the third period By referring to the determination table, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”.

That is, when the jackpot variation is executed in the third period, the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern "PB3-1", "PB3- 2”, “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”, and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to the special figure variation time of the determined variation pattern. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" corresponds to the third variable display time.

The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" as the second variable display time is , Longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PC1-1" as the first variable display time.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" as the third variable display time is the fluctuation pattern as the first variable display time Longer than the special figure fluctuation time of "PC1-1", the fluctuation pattern as the second variable display time "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5- 1” to “PC5-4” shorter than the special figure fluctuation time.

After determining the variation pattern in the process of step 018AKS108, the special figure variation time is set to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern (step 018AKS109). After executing the processing of step 018 AKS109, setting for starting the variation of the special symbols so as to start either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 018AKS110).

Fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer which is provided in the specified field of RAM102, for example. In the present embodiment, in the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, when the occurrence of starting winning is detected, the game ball passes through any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Reservation information including starting opening data indicating whether (entering) is associated with a reservation number according to the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening of each game ball It is stored in the special figure reservation storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. As an example, in the special figure reservation storage unit, the starting opening data indicating "1" corresponding to winning the first starting winning opening, or "2" corresponding to winning the second starting winning opening Starting point data is stored in association with the hold number. In the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of the special figure process processing, the suspension data stored in association with the suspension number "1" in the special figure suspension storage unit is read, and the read suspension It is determined whether the starting opening specified from the starting opening data included in the data is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. When it is determined that the starting opening specified from the starting opening data is the first starting winning opening, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1". When it is determined that the starting opening specified from the starting opening data is the second starting winning opening, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "2". In the process of step 018 AKS110, as an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A conduct. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 018AKS110, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 018AKS111). Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 018AKS112), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Next, an example of an effect operation related to the characteristic portion 018AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12.

FIG. 8-12(A) shows a confirmed decorative pattern ("777") that is a jackpot combination in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. is displayed in a stopped state, indicating a state of being controlled to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the case where the jackpot game state is controlled to the probability variable state which is the high base state after the jackpot game state ends will be described as an example. .

FIG. 8-12(B) shows a state in which the jackpot game state controlled in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(A) ends and the control to the variable probability state is started. In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state is completed in the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 8-12(B), variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. .

FIG. 8-12(C) shows a state in which a big hit variation is started during a specific period controlled to a variable probability state. In the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), the first message image AK1 representing the message "Electromagnetic Projection Gun BONUS" and the second message image AK2 representing the message "Extermination RUSH" are displayed on the image display device 5. The presentation to be displayed is started. In the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), the first message image AK1 and the second message image AK2 are displayed on the front side of the image display device 5. FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 8D, the first message image AK1 and the second message image AK2 are rendered to move to the far side of the image display device 5. FIG.

Hereinafter, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), an example of effect operation when the big hit fluctuation is started in the first period or the fourth period in the specific period will be described.

As described above, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined to be the variation pattern "PC1-1" which is the immediate hit variation pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-12(E), according to the variation pattern "PC1-1", the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, In the 5R, the fixed decorative symbols ("666") which are the jackpot combinations are stop-displayed at the same time or substantially at the same time.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), an effect operation example when the big hit variation is started in the third period of the specific period will be described. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which the variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined to be the variation pattern "PB4-1" in which the ready-to-win effect of super reach α is executed.

FIG. 8-12(F) shows a state in which the effect of moving the first message image AK1 to the front side of the image display device 5 is executed. By executing the effect shown in FIG. 8-12(F), the player is informed that the big win variation is being executed in the third period.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-12(G), an effect of displaying a cut-in image AK3 on the image display device 5 is executed as a reach effect of super reach α. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(H), in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, a confirmed decorative design to be a jackpot combination is displayed. ("666") is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), an effect operation example when the big hit variation is started in the second period of the specific period will be described. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined to be the variation pattern "PC4-1" in which the extra play effect is executed and the reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

FIG. 8-12(I) shows a state in which an effect is executed in which the second message image AK2 moves to the front side of the image display device 5 during the first fluctuation period. By executing the effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (I), the player is notified that the big win variation is being executed in the second period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(J), an effect of displaying a cut-in image AK3 on the image display device 5 is executed as a reach effect of super reach α in the first fluctuation period. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (K), during the first fluctuation period, as the first notification, each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L of the image display device 5, In 5C and 5R, a fixed decorative pattern ("666") as a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(L), during the second fluctuation period, as the second notification, a special effect, that is, a ball-out extra effect is executed. In the ball-out extra production, the image display device 5 displays a first character image AK4 representing the main character and a second character image AK5 representing the enemy character. Further, by displaying the button image AK6 representing the push button 31B on the image display device 5, an effect is executed to prompt the player to execute the operation of repeatedly hitting the push button 31B as a predetermined operation. When the push button 31B serving as the detection means detects the action of repeatedly hitting the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. A rendering of attacking an enemy character represented by with a sword (a rendering of the first character image AK4 acting on the second character image AK5) is executed. Then, a third message image AK7 is displayed on the image display device 5, indicating that the number of awarded balls to be paid out has increased by 10, indicating the message "balls paid out + 10".

As described above, in the characteristic part 018AK, the first variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time in the first period, and the second variable display time longer than the first variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time in the second period. A variable time is set, and a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the jackpot variable time in the third period. According to such a configuration, in the first period, exhilaration is generated to improve the game interest, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state is changed to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the period until the game from being prolonged and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 018AK, when the big winning variation is executed in the second period, the big winning game state is not controlled regardless of the timing during the second period when the big winning variation is executed. A time longer than the length of the second period is set as the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a time equal to or longer than the predetermined time as the jackpot variation time even when the jackpot variation is executed at any timing during the second period.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018AK, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot variation is performed in the first variation period and the second variation period after the first variation period. , and during the first variation period, the first notification that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state is performed, and during the second variation period, unlike the first notification, the jackpot game A second notification related to the condition is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the first notification indicating whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed from being prolonged, and to suppress the decline of the game interest. can. Furthermore, by executing the second notification in the second fluctuation period after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 018AK, the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the jackpot variation time in the fourth period. According to such a configuration, by setting the jackpot interval in the fourth period to be shorter than the jackpot intervals in the second and third periods, it is possible to prevent the jackpot interval from being elongated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018AK, during the second fluctuation period, a special effect is executed by using the push button 31B as detection means capable of detecting the action of the player. According to such a configuration, by allowing the player to participate in the performance, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

In the above-described embodiment, the specific period is the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol a specific number of times. However, this is only an example, and any period can be set as the specific period.

For example, each time the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed, it is determined (lottery) whether or not the high base state as the specific state is terminated, and the jackpot game state is terminated. A period from when it is determined to end the high base state may be set as the specific period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the high base state is ended by the determination, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Alternatively, the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the start of the jackpot variation of the jackpot type controlled to the probability variable state or the time reduction state as the high base state after the jackpot game state is finished is set as the specific period. may According to such a configuration, since control is performed to the next high base state immediately after the high base state ends based on the end of the specific period, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the first variable display time is shorter than the second variable display time. However, this is only an example, and the first variable display time may be any time that is equal to or less than the length of the second variable display time.

In the above embodiment, the third variable display time is longer than the first variable display time. However, this is only an example, and the third variable display time may be any time longer than the first variable display time.

In the above embodiment, the third variable display time is shorter than the second variable display time. However, this is only an example, and the third variable display time may be any time that is equal to or less than the length of the second variable display time.

In the above embodiment, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8, the variation pattern " PC1-1” has been described as having a judgment value assigned to it. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the special figure of the variation pattern "PC1-1" as the first variable display time. It has been explained assuming that the variable time is set at a rate of 100%.

However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%) in the first period. A variable display time may be set. Specifically, in the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, a time different from the first variable display time is specially designated. Variation pattern specified as variation time (for example, variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5" specifying the second variable display time as special figure variation time -1” to “PC5-4”, and variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” that specify the third variable display time as special figure variation time, etc. ) can be assigned a judgment value.

In the above embodiment, shown in FIG. 8-9, in the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the variation pattern "PC3-1" to designate the second variable display time as the special figure variation time , “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” are assigned judgment values. That is, in the above embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", as the second variable display time. "PC4-1" ~ "PC4-4", "PC5-1" ~ "PC5-4" to the special figure fluctuation time, 100% was described as being set.

However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to the second variable display time at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%). It may be set. Specifically, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, a variation pattern that specifies a time different from the second variable display time as a special figure variation time (for example, the first variable display time is specified Variation pattern "PC1-1" to specify as figure variation time and variation pattern "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4" to specify the third variable display time as special figure variation time −3”) can be assigned a judgment value.

In the above embodiment, shown in FIG. 8-11, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, the variation pattern "PB3-1" to designate the third variable display time as the special figure variation time , “PB3-2” and “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” are assigned the judgment values. That is, in the above embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the third period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern "PB3-1", "PB3-2", as the third variable display time. It was explained as being set at a rate of 100% in the special figure fluctuation time of "PB4-1" to "PB4-3".

However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the third period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to the third variable display time at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%). It may be set. Specifically, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, a variation pattern that designates a time different from the third variable display time as a special figure variation time (for example, the first variable display time is specified Variation pattern "PC1-1" to specify as figure variation time and variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4" to specify the second variable display time as special figure variation time -4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4", etc.).

In the above embodiment, the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9, and the high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11 In the decision table, it was explained that the determination value is not assigned to the variation pattern "PC1-1" that designates the first variable display time as the special figure variation time. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period or the third period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the special figure of the variation pattern "PC1-1" as the first variable display time. The description has been made assuming that the variable time is not set (set at a rate of 0%).

However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period or the third period, the jackpot variation time is set to the first variable at a first rate higher than 0% (for example, 20%). While setting the display time, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time is set to the first variable at a second rate (for example, 100%) higher than the first rate You may make it set to display time. Specifically, the first variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time in the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period or the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period. The first variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time in the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period. A judgment value smaller than the judgment value assigned to the variation pattern may be assigned.

In the above embodiment, shown in FIG. 8-8, the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period, and the high base time corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11 Variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5" that specify the second variable display time as the special figure variation time in the big hit variation pattern determination table and -1" to "PC5-4" have not been assigned judgment values. That is, in the above embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the third period, or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern "PC3-1" as the second variable display time. ”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” are not set in the special figure fluctuation time (set at a rate of 0%) described as a thing.

However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the third period, or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time is set to a third percentage higher than 0% (eg, 20%, etc.) While setting the second variable display time in the second period, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the jackpot variation time is set to the second variable at a fourth rate (eg 100%) higher than the third rate You may make it set to display time. Specifically, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, and a high-base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the fourth period In the determination table, the second variable display time is specified as the special figure variation time in the variation pattern for specifying the second variable display time as the special figure variation time in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period. A judgment value smaller than the judgment value assigned to the variation pattern may be assigned.

In the above embodiment, shown in FIG. 8-8, the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period, and the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9 Judgment value for the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" that specify the third variable display time as the special figure variation time in the big hit variation pattern determination table and was described as not assigned. That is, in the above embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the second period or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is the variation pattern "PB3-1 ”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-1” ~ “PB4-3” are not set in the special figure fluctuation time (set at a rate of 0%).

However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the second period, or the fourth period, the jackpot variation time is set to a fifth percentage higher than 0% (eg, 20%, etc.) While setting the third variable display time in the third period, when the jackpot variation is executed in the third period, the jackpot variation time is set to the third variable at a sixth rate (for example, 100%) higher than the fifth rate You may make it set to display time. Specifically, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, and a high-base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the fourth period In the determination table, the third variable display time is specified as the special figure variation time in the variation pattern for specifying the third variable display time as the special figure variation time, and in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, the third variable display time is specified as the special figure variation time. A judgment value smaller than the judgment value assigned to the variation pattern may be assigned.

In the above embodiment, when the losing variation is executed during the specific period during which the high base state is controlled, the execution time of the losing variation is any period of the first period to the fourth period during which the losing variation is performed. Even if it is executed in, it has been described as being set to the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA1-1". Also, corresponding to this, in the above-described embodiment, the length of the first period to the fourth period when the jackpot variation is not executed in the first period to the fourth period and the jackpot game state is not controlled , It has been described as being determined based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA1-1".

However, this is only an example, during a specific period of control to the high base state, if the loss variation is executed, the execution time of the loss variation is the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA1-1" may be set at different times. Specifically, in the high-base loss variation pattern determination table, a determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern that specifies a time different from the special figure variation time of the variation pattern "PA1-1" as the special figure variation time. In this case, the length of the first period to the fourth period when the jackpot variation is not executed in the first period to the fourth period and the jackpot game state is not controlled is the special figure of the determined variation pattern. It may be determined based on the fluctuation time.

In the above embodiment, when the big win variation is executed in the second period, it is not controlled to the big win game state regardless of the timing during the second period when the big winning variation is executed. It was explained that the time longer than the length of the second period in the case is set as the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation. However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the time having a length equal to or longer than the length of the second period in the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled does not affect the jackpot. It may be set as a variation jackpot variation time. Specifically, in the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, a special figure variation time that has a length equal to or longer than the length of the second period when not controlled to the jackpot game state It suffices to assign a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern specified as .

In the above embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation time is set according to the execution timing of the big hit variation (according to the time saving number count value). However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, even if the jackpot variation time is set regardless of the execution timing of the jackpot variation (regardless of the time saving count value). good. Specifically, in the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the judgment value may be assigned to the variation pattern regardless of the time saving frequency count value.

In the above embodiment, when the jackpot variation is performed in the second period, the jackpot variation is performed over the first variation period and the second variation period. However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the jackpot variation is performed in the first variation period, the second variation period, and the third variation after the second variation period. It may be executed over a period of time. In this case, during the third fluctuation period, an effect different from the first notification and the second notification (for example, an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined manner) effect, etc.) may be executed as the third notification. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as the second notification, it is assumed that the ball-out extra effect is executed. However, this is only an example, and any effect can be executed as the second notification.

For example, when one jackpot variation is executed in the second period, a pending memory corresponding to another jackpot variation that has not yet been executed is stored in the special figure pending storage unit, and based on the one jackpot variation After the end of the big win game state controlled by the second game state, a holding continuous performance suggesting that the game state will be controlled to the big win game state based on the other big win variation is executed as the second notification in the second variation period. good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

Alternatively, the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, one of the set values 1 to 3), and based on the set set value, it is advantageous for the player. The game can be progressed so that the degree (for example, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the first special game or the second special game is "big win") is different, and the big win variation is executed in the second period. In this case, a setting suggestion performance suggesting a set value set during the big win game state controlled based on the big win variation may be executed as the second notification in the second variation period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, it is assumed that the additional performance is always executed. However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the extra ball payout performance, and the extra ball payout performance is executed according to the result of the determination. You may do so. For example, a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "5R probability variable jackpot", "10R probability variable jackpot", "15R probability variable jackpot", etc.) are provided, and when the jackpot fluctuation is executed in the second period, the ball output performance is executed. Whether or not may be determined according to the jackpot type. Specifically, according to the type of the jackpot, either a variation pattern in which the extra ball-out performance is executed or a variation pattern in which the extra-balls-out performance is not executed is determined as the variation pattern, whereby the extra ball-out performance is determined. You can decide whether to execute Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to execute the ball-out extra effect in a process different from the determination of the variation pattern. That is, while the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, in the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process, according to the jackpot type It may be determined whether or not to execute the ball-out addition performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the payout extra effect will be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the above embodiment, when the jackpot variation is executed in the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to the first variable display time. However, this is only an example, and when the big win variation is executed in the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the big win variation can be set to any time shorter than at least the third variable display time. For example, when the jackpot variation is executed in the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to a specific variable display time shorter than the third variable display time and different from the first variable display time. good too. The specific variable display time may be longer than the first variable display time, or may be shorter than the first variable display time. Specifically, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period are respectively provided, and the table corresponding to the fourth period is provided. In the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table, a determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern that designates a specific variable display time as a special figure variation time.

Incidentally, when the jackpot variation is executed in the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation may be set at a rate of 100% of the specific variable display time. Concretely, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, the determination value may be assigned only to the variation pattern that designates the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time. Alternatively, when the jackpot variation is executed in the fourth period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation may be set to a specific variable display time at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%). Specifically, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, a variation pattern that designates a time different from the specific variable display time as a special figure variation time (for example, the first variable display time is a special figure variation Variation pattern "PC1-1" to specify as time and variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4" to specify the second variable display time as special figure variation time ", "PC5-1" ~ "PC5-4", variation pattern "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" ~ "PB4- 3”) can be assigned a judgment value.

In addition, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the second period or the third period, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is not set to the specific variable display time (set at a rate of 0%) can be Specifically, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, and a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period In the table, it is sufficient not to assign a determination value to a variation pattern that designates a specific variable display time as a special figure variation time. Alternatively, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the second period, or the third period, the jackpot variation time is set to the specific variable display time at a seventh rate (for example, 20%) higher than 0%. On the other hand, when the jackpot variation is executed in the fourth period, the jackpot variation time may be set to the specific variable display time at an eighth rate (for example, 100%) higher than the seventh rate. . Specifically, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, and a high-base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the third period In the determination table, the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time, and the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time in the high base time jackpot variation pattern decision table corresponding to the fourth period A judgment value that is smaller than the judgment value assigned to .

In the above embodiment, the push button 32B has been described as detecting means capable of detecting the action of the player. However, this is only an example, and the detection means may have a configuration different from that of the push button 32B. For example, the stick controller 31A is a detecting means, and the stick controller 31A as the detecting means detects a pressing operation of a trigger button provided on the stick controller 31A as a predetermined action by the player. It is also possible to execute a ball-out extra effect as a performance (execute a ball-out extra effect as a specific effect using the stick controller 31A as a detection means).

In the above embodiment, the third message image AK7 shown in FIG. It was explained assuming that the production to be performed) is executed. However, this is only an example, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the extra ball-out effect is determined according to the execution timing of the jackpot variation (to the time-saving count value Depending on the number, an effect may be executed to suggest that the number has increased by a different number. For example, if the time-saving count value is within the range of “5” to “9”, an effect that suggests that the number of awarded balls to be paid out has increased by 100 in the extra ball-out effect, and the time-saving count is counted. If the value is within the range of '10' to '19', an effect indicating that the number of awarded balls to be paid out has increased by 300 in the ball-out extra effect, and the time-saving count value is '20'. ~ If it is included in the range of "29", the production that suggests that the number of prize balls to be paid out has increased by 500 in the extra ball output production, and the time saving count value is "30" to "39" If it is included in the range, a production that suggests that the number of awarded balls to be paid out has increased by 700 in the ball-out extra production, and if the time-saving count value is included in the range of "40" to "49" In the above, in the payout extra performance, it is sufficient to make an effect suggesting that the number of paid out prize balls has increased by 1000. - 特許庁According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the ball-out extra effect is executed, thereby improving the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation executed during the specific period is set according to which of the first to fourth periods the jackpot variation is performed. However, this is only an example, and the loss variation time of the loss variation executed during the specific period is set according to which of the first period to the fourth period the loss variation is performed. may Loss fluctuation time is the execution time of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure at which the display result in the special figure game becomes "losing".

Specifically, a first variable display time is set as a loss variation time in a first period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time is set as a loss variation time in a second period, and a second variable display time is set as a loss variation time. In the third period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the loss variation time, and in the fourth period, the first variable display time is set as the loss variation time. should be set as In other words, the loss variation time of the loss variation performed in the first period is set to the first variable display time, the loss variation time of the loss variation performed in the second period is set to the second variable display time, and the The loss variation time of the loss variation performed in the third period may be set as the third variable display time, and the loss variation time of the loss variation performed in the fourth period may be set as the first variable display time.

By setting the loss variation time of the loss variation according to which of the first period to the fourth period the loss variation is executed, the big win interval can be set. That is, the longer the loss variation time, the longer the big win interval, and the shorter the loss variation time, the shorter the big win interval.

In the first period, by setting the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time as the loss variation time, the big hit interval in the first period is changed to the second period and the third period. By setting the interval shorter than the big hit interval, an exhilarating feeling can be generated and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the second period, by setting the second variable display time longer than the first variable display time and the third variable display time as the loss variation time, the big hit interval in the second period is changed to the first period and the third period By setting longer than the jackpot interval, excessive gambling can be suppressed.

In the third period, by setting the third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time as the loss variation time, the big win interval in the third period is changed to the big win interval in the first period. In addition to suppressing excessive gambling property, the big win interval in the third period is set shorter than the big win interval in the second period to prevent the big win interval from being prolonged and enhance the interest of the game. Decrease can be suppressed.

In the fourth period, by setting the first variable display time that is shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time as the loss fluctuation time, the big hit interval in the fourth period is changed to that in the second period and the third period. By setting it to be shorter than the big win interval, it is possible to prevent the big win interval from being elongated and suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Note that when the loss variation is executed in the fourth period, the loss variation time of the loss variation is set to an arbitrary time different from the first variable display time and at least shorter than the third variable display time. good too.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other in any way.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 018AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 018AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) advantageous to a player,
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot game state until the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times, etc.)) Over a specific state (for example, high base state, etc.) controllable state control means (for example, in the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of the special symbol process processing, control to a high base state, time reduction control and high opening control CPU 103 etc. to start),
A setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 018AKS108, 018AKS109, etc.) that can set variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time, etc.),
with
The specific period is the first period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the first to fourth times, etc.), and the first period After the second period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the 5th to 49th times, etc.), and the second period after the second period 3 periods (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special figure or the second special figure is executed, etc.)
The setting means
At a rate higher than the second period in the first period, it is possible to set the first variable display time (such as the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PC1-1") (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 By executing, when it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "1" to "4" (when it is determined to be the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8 And the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined by referring to the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation is the special figure specified in the determined variation pattern. such as the CPU 103 that sets the variable time),
A second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, time saving When the number count value is determined to be within the range of "5" to "49" (when determined to be the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9 A CPU 103 that determines a variation pattern of a big hit variation with reference to a big hit variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern, etc.),
A third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, the variation pattern “PB3- 1”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the time saving number count value When it is determined that is included in the range of "50" to "99" (when it is determined that it is the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11 A CPU 103 that determines a variation pattern of a big hit variation with reference to a pattern determination table and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the first period, exhilaration is generated to improve the game interest, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state is changed to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the period until the game from being prolonged and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine (1) above relating to the characteristic portion 018AK,
The setting means does not control to the advantageous state during the second period, regardless of the timing during the second period when the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed. In the case, set the time longer than the length of the second period as the variable display time in the second period (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the time reduction number count value is "5" to "49" range (if it is determined to be the second period), the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 8-9 is not executed in the second period, Variation pattern "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" ~ "PC4-4", "PC5-1" ~ longer than the length of the second period when not controlled to the jackpot gaming state The variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined by referring to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period in which the judgment value is assigned to "PC5-4", and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation is determined. CPU103 etc. to be set to the special figure fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, even if the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed at any timing during the second period, the variable display time in the second period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. time can be secured.

(3) In the gaming machine (1) or (2) above relating to the characteristic portion 018AK,
When controlled to the advantageous state in the second period, the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is performed over the first fluctuation period and the second fluctuation period after the first fluctuation period. executable (for example, the jackpot variation performed during the second period can be performed over the first variation period and the second variation period shown in FIG. 8-2, etc.),
It is possible to execute the first notification (for example, derivation of the display result of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, etc.) that suggests whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state in the first fluctuation period,
In the second fluctuation period, unlike the first notification, a second notification related to the advantageous state (for example, a ball-out performance, etc.) can be executed.
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the execution of the first notification suggesting whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state from being prolonged, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. . Furthermore, by executing the second notification in the second fluctuation period after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the game interest can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic portion 018AK,
The specific period is the fourth period after the third period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the 100th to 150th first special figure or the second special figure is executed) further includes
The setting means sets a fourth variable display time (for example, a first variable display time or a specific variable display time) shorter than at least the third variable display time in the fourth period at a higher rate than in the third period. Can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, if it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "100" to "150" (it is determined to be the fourth period case), determine the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8, and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation such as CPU 103 to set the special figure fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, in the fourth period, it is possible to prevent the period from one advantageous state to the next advantageous state from being prolonged, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic portion 018AK,
It further comprises detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) capable of detecting player's actions,
In the second period, it is possible to execute a specific effect using the detection means (for example, a ball-out extra effect, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, by allowing the player to participate in the performance, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. hand,
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot game state until the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times, etc.)) Over a specific state (for example, high base state, etc.) controllable state control means (for example, in the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of the special symbol process processing, control to a high base state, time reduction control and high opening control CPU 103 etc. to start),
Determining means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 018AKS108, 018AKS109, etc.) that can determine variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time, etc.),
with
The specific period is the first period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the first to fourth times, etc.), and the first period After the second period (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed for the 5th to 49th times, etc.), and the second period after the second period 3 periods (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special figure or the second special figure is executed, etc.)
The determining means is
At a rate higher than the second period in the first period, it is possible to determine the first variable display time (such as the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PC1-1") (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 By executing, when it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "1" to "4" (when it is determined to be the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8 And the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined by referring to the high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, and the special figure variation time of the jackpot variation is the special figure specified in the determined variation pattern. CPU 103 etc. determined at variable time),
A second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be determined (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, time saving When the number count value is determined to be within the range of "5" to "49" (when determined to be the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9 A CPU 103 that determines a variation pattern of a big hit variation with reference to a big hit variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern, etc.),
A third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, the variation pattern “PB3- 1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be determined (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, time saving number count value When it is determined that is included in the range of "50" to "99" (when it is determined to be the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11 A CPU 103 that determines a variation pattern of a big hit variation with reference to a pattern determination table and determines a special figure variation time of the big hit variation as a special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern, etc.),
moreover,
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled at least to an advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating judgment random numbers for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state. Determining advantageous state determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set value Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is normal state Part) game machine that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as a big hit reference value regardless of whether it is a probability variable state.
According to such a configuration, in the first period, exhilaration is generated to improve the game interest, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state is changed to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the period until the game from being prolonged and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

Also, the setting value may be associated with the variable display time. For example, when the set value is 1, the first variable display pattern is more likely to be selected than when the set value is 6, and when the set value is 6, the third variable display pattern is more likely to be selected. By doing so, the player can guess the set value from the variable display pattern, and the interest in the game is improved.

Also, a plurality of display modes may be provided for a specific period and changed according to a set value. For example, when the set value is high, the display mode may change more easily than when the set value is low. By doing so, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the setting value suggesting effect by the variable display time or display mode in the specific period, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the game, the display mode of the image display device (effect display device) or The set value suggesting effect may be performed depending on the operation mode of the movable body. For example, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (occurrence of a specific type of jackpot, continuation of a certain number of probability variable jackpots, occurrence of a specific type of ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect, etc.), the character is displayed on the image display device, or A movable body is operated, and each time a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the display mode of the character and the motion mode of the movable body are selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and each character is selected according to a set value. By varying the selection rate and the selection rate of each action mode, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more likely it is that a specific type of character will appear when a predetermined execution condition is established, or , the movable body may be made easier to move in a specific type of motion mode. By doing so, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during a game, the setting value suggesting effect is performed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving interest and reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player ) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A plurality of stages of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled at least to an advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player) 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating judgment random numbers for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state. Determining advantageous state determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set value Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each setting Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is normal state Part) game machine that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as a big hit reference value regardless of whether it is a probability variable state. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another form.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 207SG of this Embodiment)

Next, a characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-7, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories (special figure reserved memory number) of variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed on the game board 2. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general prize winning opening 10, and the right game area 207SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-7, the main board 11 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11. The lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the substrate case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 207SG025A, second reservation display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state in which game balls are launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 207SG133 that lights in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 207SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, each of the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 207SG025A and second pending display 207SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time a variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of this embodiment). In the part 207SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially executed. It looks like Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-6, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 207SG025A is lit and the left two LEDs of the second suspension indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure suspension memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure suspension memory After that, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. An origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 9-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko game machine 1 (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105, CPU 103 to the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the ranges shown in FIGS. 9-9, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Figures 9-10 show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than In addition, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach are set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variable display result "big hit", so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, the form in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is exemplified. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 9-11 (B) Judgment table (setting value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 9-12 (B) (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4 ), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 9-21 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

9-11(A) to 9-16(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, set 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/200, when the set value is 2, the set value is 1/180, and when the set value is 3, the set value is 1/200). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-16, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state according to each setting value Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability change for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, Figure 9-11 (A), Figure 9-12 (A), Figure 9-13 (A), Figure 9-14 (A), Figure 9-15 (A), Figure 9-16 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, Figure 9-11 (B), Figure 9-12 (B), Figure 9-13 (B), Figure 9-14 (B), Figure 9-15 (B), Figure 9-16 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" depending on the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value, regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-19, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value, regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the judgment value contained in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, and regardless of the game state and setting value, hit judgment Based on the value of 32767, the variable display result is determined with the determination value contained within a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) and 9-16(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win gaming state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 9-21 (A) and Figure 9-21 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-22. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the low-probability high base state and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs depending on the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of the big win increases, and the big win C as the big win type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change. It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the probability of a big hit or A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), if the setting value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for failure (for the number of total pending storage in the low base of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).
In addition, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, it may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is illustrated in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach is different according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIGS. 9-10). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation of super reach loss The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the variation pattern of super reach out in accordance with the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. may be executed with a variation pattern of

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. . The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special figure display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 207SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 207SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and is for determining the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 207SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 9-26(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 207SG191, the production control timer setting unit 207SG192, the production control counter setting unit 207SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 207SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning, the reservation display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the reservation storage display is set is set to the first special figure reservation storage and A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when execution of the pending display prior notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process. , When the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 5D and the second suspension memory display area 5U, and execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode ) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the reserved memory display In the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a high possibility of super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 9-26(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), when the variable display of the effect pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in the pre-reading notice setting process in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set, and the pending display flag is set. If there is an entry that is not displayed, depending on whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed based on the pattern designation command and the variable category command stored corresponding to the entry, and whether the pending display notice effect is executed It determines the display mode (display pattern) of the pending memory display. When the execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the pending memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the display mode of the pending memory display. is determined as a white ○. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the reserved storage display is set to the reserved display flag.

After the pending display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (see FIG. 9-52) so that the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 207SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 207SG005U.

Note that the feature part 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a prefetch notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the prefetch notice setting process, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, as the pre-reading notice effect, the background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, and the motion effect in which the movable body provided in the pachinko game machine 1 operates. An effect other than the display announcement effect may be made executable.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(A), the display monitor 207SG029 has a first display section 207SG029A, a second display section 207SG029B, a third display section 207SG029C, and a fourth display section 207SG029D. Each of the first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 207SG029A to fifth display section 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 (B) and 9-27 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 207SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of this embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the main substrate 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-28, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko game machine When the setting value set to 1 is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 207SG029, and when the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to "5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 207SG029. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. 9-30 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), proceed to 207SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). move on.

At 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

At 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when starting the pachinko game machine 1 this time (whether to execute RAM clear processing (207SGSa009)) or not ( 207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) without executing, go to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), proceed to 207SGSa022; (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

In addition, at 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, ie, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 stops blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, an example is shown in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (207SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), Fig. 9-36 As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B that constitute the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal set value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. , the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (B), the CPU 103 flashes all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the game hall, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), and the display monitor 207SG029 , the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is recovered, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 9-31(A) is a flow chart showing RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) where the RAM clear flag is stored. (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to 207SGSa042.If the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to , and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

In the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area as shown in FIG. 9-31(B). Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 onwards) include special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol and a set value read out for setting the display result determination table when determining the variable display result in normal processing (determination used set value) are stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the leading address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be executed without fail. A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set values.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, the form of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clearing process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When activated by the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F003 and after in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG in this embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the processing of storing and reading RAM clear flags in RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. In addition, when storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102, since the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM clear flag can be changed by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 9-32 is a flow chart showing the set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first reservation indicator. 207SG025A starts blinking the second suspension indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa052, see FIG. 9-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 9-6). lighting is started (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is stored in address F000 in RAM 102. is set to "1" (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1̂& is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056). If the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), repeat the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056, and if the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056; Y) executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. For example, the set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and a value larger by one than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. Then, the display monitor 207SG029 displays the setting value set in the display monitor 207SG029.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF at 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and turn off all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A, and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored at address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the provisional setting value stored at address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is the same. If the set value stored at address F001 is different from the provisional set value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 is stored at address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional set values are updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set values.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 9-33 is a flow chart showing set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first holding indicator. 207SG025A starts blinking the second suspension indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa102, see FIG. 9-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 9-6). lighting is started (207SGSa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power interruption detection process execution to wait until the power interruption detection process is executed (207SGSa105 ). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa107). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processing of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa107; Y) executes a power failure detection process (207SGSa108). This power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game arcade management computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. Also, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value in the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the lighting of the round indicator 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the flashing of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player or the store clerk of the game hall or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that the pachinko machine 1 is changing the set value or that the set value is being changed. is being confirmed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, at the start of the setting value change processing or the setting value confirmation processing, as a mode according to the setting value change processing or the setting value confirmation processing, Although a form in which only one LED is lit is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 is the jackpot A, jackpot shown in FIG. 9-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lights may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off once, the lock switch 207SG051 is pressed while the game machine frame 207SG003 is open. , and the clear switch are turned on to execute the set value change process.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-35(A) to 9-35(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the first display section 207SG029A and the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the display using the fourth display section 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 9-27) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value change processing by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. When the setting switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display section 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (disconnected), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the frame 207SG003 for the game machine is open. (The clear switch is turned off) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-35 (A), 9-35 (B) and 9-35 (E), the first The display using the display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D (the display of the base values shown in FIG. 9-27) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display section 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 9-34 is a flow chart showing power failure detection processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change processing and set value confirmation processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (207SGS081). When there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and when there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and stores the identified backup data in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are to be executed later.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIG. 9-39. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (207SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 207SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 207SGS502 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (207SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (207SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 207SGS505, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (207SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). .

After executing either of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 207SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time. It is specified to determine the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525).

Following the processing of 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the process of 207SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (207SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the processing of 207SGS504 is performed. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (207SGS516), the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-40(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 207SGS512 in FIG. 9-39 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 207SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is set as "big hit" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state is determined and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 207SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop display the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern as a special figure display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to this, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and in which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

9-40 (A) in the random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-40 (A), the CPU103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time-saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152, etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (207SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address (see FIG. 9-31(B)) in the RAM 102 and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 9-42, the process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 determines the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it will be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 207SGS572, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not become a big hit (207SGS572; N), a small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table Compare the numerical value range and the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment (207SGS573), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment extracted at 207SGS509 in FIG. 9-39 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 207SGS574 is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display will result in a loss (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 9-40 (A), it is checked whether it is determined that the variable display will be a big hit at 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and if it is determined that it will not be a big hit (207SGS526; N), the variable display at 207SGS525 Check whether it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "miss (207SGS527a), whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time-saving state (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (207SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern (207SGS535), and set to 207SGS536. move on.

In addition, when it is determined at 207SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (207SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

Also, if the time saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (207SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y ), select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure (207SGS530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and deviation pattern determination table D, this characteristic unit 207SG has a variation pattern determination for deviation that is used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4. A table B and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. In, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, among the ranges that can be taken by the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 1 to 450 when the setting value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the setting value is 2, When the set value is 3, 1 to 410 are assigned, when the set value is 4, 1 to 390 are assigned, when the set value is 5, 1 to 370 are assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1 to 350 are assigned.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1 to 500, and the set value is 1 to 480 if the set value is 2, 1 to 460 if the set value is 3, 1 to 440 if the set value is 4, 1 to 420 if the set value is 5, 1 to 420 if the set value is 6 400 are assigned to each.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, and set If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss, 701 to 997 are assigned regardless of the set value, out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the super reach variation pattern. there is

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is made after the determination. Also always becomes a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss .

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (207SGS536). In this characteristic portion 207SG, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIG. 9-41 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), it moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, if the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. In this way, the processing of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at 207SGS541, and whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" determine whether As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of 207SGS546, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A The indicated pending data is shifted upward by one entry (207SGS547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), it moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS549). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-31(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 9-31(B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not there is a determination used setting value stored (207SGS551). If it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is the same as the stored determined used set value (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, if it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored judgment used setting value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value to the effect control board 12 Setting for transmission is performed (207SGS554), and a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), looping. go into processing. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so the loop processing puts the pachinko gaming machine in a game-disabled state (game-disabled state). The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 with the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display. When the set values are different, the management device of the game parlor can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing and does not execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state. However, the CPU 103 performs processing such as restricting the shooting of game balls, and not performing the payout of prize balls or the variable display of special symbols even if the game balls to each winning hole win. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, a difference between the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is treated as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected by the management device of the game hall. Although recognizable forms are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are shown in FIGS. 9-36 ( B) or a display mode (lighting mode) such as shown in FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of the characteristic portion 207SG, if the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the set value used for determination, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and the game Although the security signal is output only once to the field management device, the present invention is not limited to this. may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-described unplayable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, when the set value of judgment used and the set value currently stored at the top address of RAM 102 are different, CPU 103 puts pachinko gaming machine 1 in a non-playable state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, a game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored at the top address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the used setting value may be stored at the head address of the RAM 102, or the most unfavorable value for the player (this By setting 1) in the characterizing section 207SG of the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined in 207SGS551 that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553 If it is determined that the stored judgment used set value is the same (207SGS553: Y), select the special figure display result judgment table according to the current game state, the start mouth buffer value and the set value (207SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 9-40(A), that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 9-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit at 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and if it is determined that it will not result in a big hit (207SGS558; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display will result in a small hit at 207SGS557. (207SGS559).

When it is determined at 207SGS558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 9-21 (A) and (B) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in the jackpot type determination table. , "jackpot C", which one of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be determined (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 207SGS563, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Whether or not to control is determined before deriving a fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", then "1", if "jackpot B", then "2", and if "jackpot C", then "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined at 207SGS559 that it will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), it proceeds to 207SGS560 and sets the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 to ON state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is set), whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) A fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the prior determination result of , and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot" at 207SGS558, when the jackpot type at 207SGS563 is "jackpot A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. set to In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), the advance to the effect that the special figure display result is "small hit" Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol at 207SGS565, after updating and storing the set value specified at 207SGS553 in RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process. (207SGS567), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, since the set value used for determination is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 9-31(B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. In this example, the used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing the value in the area of the RAM 102 that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the used setting value and the RAM 102 can be determined when executing the first variable display. The set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) stored at the head address of the pachinko game machine 1 may be compared.

Incidentally, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-40 and 9-41, a mode of determining the variable display result using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the comparison process (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIG. 9-41) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the game stop state (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when executing the random value determination process at the time of winning, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the used determination set value, or the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination use value as the result of the process Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set value does not match the finished set value, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 9-43 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs a CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the production control board 12. circuit) register settings, etc.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player is After accepting the input of information, information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). If the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information stored in the RAM 122 and the performance information (the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of (information including the number of times of super reach etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and notifies that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. (207SGS410) RAM clear notification processing for (executing RAM clear notification). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(A), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared). The display of the notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko machine 1 is started. For example, it is sufficient to notify that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process for notifying that an operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that a setting value is being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , the notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. The state in which the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open generally means that the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, and the store clerk or the like of the game arcade who changes or confirms the setting values visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. is in a state of In other words, the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the setting value. It is conceivable that the store clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Therefore, as the setting value changing notification and the setting value checking notification, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are used to notify the pachinko machine to the game parlor clerk who changes or confirms the setting value. 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body initialization process for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. Execute the process (207SGS414). In addition, in the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. (See Figure 9-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-47 and 9-48. FIG. 9-47 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing the operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 9-48, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection time operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their origin position (first position) and effect position (second position). 2 position) and the return movement from the performance position to the origin position are the actual movement modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display.

The effect control CPU 120, when the detected parts of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed, If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, when transported or installed on the game island, or if it was not possible to return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when the performance is executed, the motor is disconnected) When the return to the origin of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed or cannot be operated due to a malfunction, failure, or catching, etc., a movable body error (abnormal operation) occurs, or the vibration of the game machine causes it to move from the origin position. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 9-32) due to circumstances, etc.), return to the origin Execute non-detection operation control for Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position when the non-detection operation control is executed, only the movement of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position is performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The motion control for confirming the actual motion is the same motion as the actual motion actually performed in the performance using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the motion of the movable body performed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. 9-48(A) and 9-48(B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. , 207SG322 at actual operating speeds. That is, for example, when the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated, even if the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, the one movement section and other movement sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same movement section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 The actual operating speed may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322 are not necessarily the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and If there are differences in operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not always the same.

As shown in FIG. 9-48 (A), when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the performance position, and to accelerate from the performance position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is set to low between the origin position and the production position. Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, the effect control CPU120, when executing the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the lowest speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the lowest speed Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at speeds within the range of , the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed Each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speed is adjusted so as to achieve the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the lowest control speed, they are operated at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, they are operated at the maximum speed. It will be explained assuming that

Here, the control speed is set so that the motion speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is the lowest speed in the motion control for actual motion confirmation. Further, when returning to the original position after moving to the performance position, the movable body 207SG321, SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321. 207SG322 is reliably decelerated, and then the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (B), the effect control CPU 120, when executing the non-detection operation control, during the period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position , to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU120, the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control (maximum operation speed) is the speed below the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control (this implementation In the feature part 207SG in the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. When the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected parts, or the movable bodies cannot be reliably detected from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 and the like may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 changes the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. (207SGS415). If the setting value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412, and if a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; Y) goes to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

At 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If so (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not ended (207SGS419; N), proceed to 207SGS412; Determine if the flag is set (207SGS420).

In 207SGS420, if the setting value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the setting value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) is the same process as 207SGS413. Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as 207SGS414, is executed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), proceed to 207SGS422. (207SGS424; Y) goes to 207SGS427.

As described above, for the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the set value confirmation in progress notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process to run. As described above, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed. After completing the operation check, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-49(A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. If it is received, that is, if the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed again. A movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-49(B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has not yet been completed. If the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed in a state where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It's like

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-49(C), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization processing has not yet ended. In other words, if the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed while the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process being executed are executed. Only the initialization process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

In addition, when there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command at 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the error designation command (207SGS425). . If an error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) is executed to notify an error indicated by the error designation command. If an error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N) , 207 SGS 403 .

As the error notification in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. good. Since the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified by the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 in this manner, the player can understand that an incorrect value is set as the setting value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again in a state in which power was interrupted during the change of the set value, and the set value (determined used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the head address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the preset value. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the error reporting process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the error reporting process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. , there are two error notification processes.

Of these, for the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an error that occurred when the pachinko game machine 1 was started (the Error notification processing (207SGS439) that can be executed after the notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted by the pachinko gaming machine 1 The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the completion of the activation (reception of the error designation command transmitted by the processing of 207SGS554 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41 by the CPU 103). Just do it.

Thus, in the effect control main process in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of , from the RAM 122, the performance information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) ) and set value information (one of the numerical values “1” to “6” corresponding to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122 . Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the performance information are not cleared from the RAM 122, but the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. It overwrites (updates and memorizes) the set value information that exists.

That is, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting value confirmation state, or setting value change state. there is

Then, at 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the notification. Start displaying the initial pattern according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns as initial patterns in a combination of "1", "2" and "3" from the left. Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays the initial symbol " 4”, “5”, and “6” are combined to start displaying the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is When set, a combination of "4", "5", and "6" are used as initial patterns at a higher rate than when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is The initial pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or when a set value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Also, when a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the sound to be output, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be varied.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" to the pre-reading regulation counter in order to regulate the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations (207SGS428). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interruption from the startup of the pachinko game machine 1, it identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, It selects the activation notification process table corresponding to the received command and starts the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, the pachinko game machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table by executing start-notifying processing in subsequent interrupts. Notification should be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, the command received at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-46, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives a new When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. It may be different from the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, that is, when the new setting value is not set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The 60-second emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 and the 30-second emission start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It includes both executing the output of B.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). The timing for starting light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the timing for starting outputting the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing for starting displaying the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the setting value change end notification command is received, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. In contrast, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall or each machine counter, and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up. A signal that can specify that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as a start notification when the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the device for executing the activation notification is partly common regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. (in any case, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot. Depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification differs (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the image display device 5 , a message image may be displayed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In some cases, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko game machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers). Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When the program is started by the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared."

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals as described above, different terminals may be used to output signals to the management device according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is displayed as the setting value changing notification. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the set value is completed, the signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the activation notification process, the mode of activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified in a form in which it is executed even when any of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, and setting value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is not operated even if the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command are received. A command that does not execute activation notification may be provided.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, different modes of startup notification are executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, or the pachinko game machine 1 Although a form in which different combinations of decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the is activated, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decoration patterns may all be different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only some of them may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, when it is started by cold start, when it is started in the setting change state, when it is started in the setting confirmation state also exemplifies a mode of executing start notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start or when it is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-51, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (207SGS441). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9-8) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, production random number update processing (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating production random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers (207SGS435), player information input processing (207SGS436) for accepting input of player information, game A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information, a performance information totalization process (207SGS438) for totalizing performance information, and an error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122 . Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variable display, the big win game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and generates the two-dimensional code. is displayed on the image display device 5 . After displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

In the production information tallying process, the production control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as information for production each time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed. do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received from the CPU 103 . If an error designation command has been received, the error notification corresponding to the received error designation command is executed.

Next, the effect control process processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-52, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451). When the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the prefetch advance notice setting process (S161), it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U. The pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed to update the pending memory display number and the display mode of the pending memory display according to the value of the pending memory number and the pending display flag stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. , S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

In addition, when the value of the prefetch regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452 ). If the value of the effect control process flag is one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is executed according to the effect control process flag. To S177 (see FIG. 7) to execute one of the processing, if the value of the production control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), -1 the value of the prefetch regulation counter (207SGS453), Hold display update processing (207SGS454) is executed and one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 immediately after starting, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment, based on the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the production control CPU120 executes the production control main processing and the production control process processing, four times variable display However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the start of the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103 starts the start winning determination process (Fig. 5) is not executed, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, based on the pachinko game machine 1 becoming ready for a game, execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The light intensity of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, etc. may be set to the factory shipment state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the prefetch notice effect, For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an effect of moving a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an effect of emitting light from the game effect lamp 9 may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Regardless, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values. Then, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), from 1238 according to each setting value The range up to the value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is set to a non-common numerical range from 1020 according to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

Especially in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is plural. Compared to the case where it is provided, it is not necessary to execute the judgment of whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to the jackpot game state) more than once. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, the above-described hit determination value With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges. , Whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the variable state Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the big hit game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure The number of determination values included in the range is different (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, whereas the second special figure display result The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice). is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small winning game state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value is 6, whether it is controlled to the big hit game state When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value, and the small winning game state is controlled. When judging whether or not, it may be judged whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the fluctuation special figure, so the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

Moreover, the RAM 102 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment can store the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment stores in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). In addition to reading out the setting value, set the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value corresponding to the read setting value (set the display result determination table according to the set value), and enter the big hit game state It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting values. It is possible to prevent the display result from being judged.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, a setting value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read setting value. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read setting values. . When the display result determination table is set according to the setting values read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting is performed during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the set values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and stores the read set values and the previous variable display result. The setting value read out from the RAM 102 (determination used setting value) is compared with the setting value read out from the RAM 102 for determination. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 9-50), it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to the reading of an inappropriate set value. can. Furthermore, not only can it be possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but it is also possible to make people around the gaming machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can quickly deal with the abnormal setting value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used setting value every time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be set based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, the effect An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-40 to 9-42, the CPU 103 uses a variable display result determination module common to when executing the winning random number value determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between the execution of the winning random number value determination and the execution of the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the setting value read from the RAM 102 setting the display result determination table according to), so it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small hit game state. When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the processing for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is shared. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, when 1 (set value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, only the common numerical range is targeted as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state. Therefore, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, a form is illustrated in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big-hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

This embodiment also includes invention 207SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, the setting state cannot be appropriately notified. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-30), the value set by the setting means is changed. Transition to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32),
When it is in the setting state, the information display section displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit is in the setting state in which variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is performed. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 2 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting means sets to a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 9-33) in which the set values that have been set can be confirmed,
When it is in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that enables recognition of the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, the part that lights all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the information display section that executes the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, notifies that the confirmation state is in effect. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-37). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when it is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. different parts)
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can be recognized as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display A part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the variable display section.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. part),
As a display that can be recognized that it is the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display units are displayed in a lighting state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B The part that lights up all segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 6 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a game by shooting game media into game areas (e.g., left game area 207SG002L and right game area 207SG002R),
The information display unit includes a shooting direction reporting unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that reports the shooting direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the firing direction notification unit displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37(A), The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the shooting direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 7 of invention 207SG,
Equipped with a pending storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the holding display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), the setting A portion that blinks all the segments that constitute the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B in the value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the hold display section.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 8 of invention 207SG,
a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media are less likely to enter than the first state in the advantageous state;
The information display unit includes a number of times notification unit (for example, a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device becomes the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), the setting A part where only one segment among the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 is lit in the value change state or the set value confirmation state)
According to the game machine characterized by the following, according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the number of times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 8 of invention 207SG,
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
State information storage means (for example, the area of address F002 of RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means when the power is turned on;
with
The game control means is
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is established. When the game information is being erased, an initialization process (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 9-31(A)) for initializing the game information storage means is executed. is executable and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial state executed when the first condition is satisfied. initialization processing and common initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a portion capable of executing RAM clear processing and set value change processing),
The state information is not erased when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). part that does not)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be shared between when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization processing based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

This embodiment also includes invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state cannot be favorably ignored. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 208SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-30), the value set by the setting means is changed. Transition to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display that can specify that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37B). , If an error occurs more than the set value, all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area where variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since the fact that the operation has been performed is notified by the display, it is possible to appropriately notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition has been met.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is an error related to at least a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error greater than or equal to the set value). It is possible to suitably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and that the set value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set values changed in the setting state are determined, an error related to the storage area storing the set values will occur when the power failure is restored. Even if there is no error, a display that can identify the occurrence of an error is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is restored from a power failure during setting change as shown in FIG. 9-37(B), the first A part that blinks all the segments that constitute the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the setting value needs to be reset due to the power failure occurring before the setting value is determined without providing a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that it is.

This embodiment also includes invention 209SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent No. 6209653, for example, discloses a pachinko game machine having information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value to be awarded. However, when applying the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 to the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the display unit for confirming the set value and the information display means There was a problem that the cost of the game machine could not be reduced if each was provided separately. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (e.g., a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a big winning opening, etc.) The part where prize balls are paid out by doing) and
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, the base shown in FIG. information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying
with
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, the pachinko game If the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the setting value can be displayed in the setting value confirmation state),
The number of display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value When displayed, the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D are used, and when the set values are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display section Part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Since there is no need to provide them individually, the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can specify that an error has occurred in at least the storage area storing the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(B), When a set value abnormal error occurs, the portion where "E."
When the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed, the number of the display units used is the same (for example, FIGS. 9-35 (A) and 9-36 (B) , the display monitor 207SG029 displays the base value and the occurrence of an abnormal error on the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display. 207SG029D), and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to are different error information.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be lit independently (for example, the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D each have eight display sections. segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means at the time of power-on satisfies an initialization condition (for example, that a clear switch is ON), the information display means displays the information displayed on the small screen constituting each display unit. All the display portions are turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(A), the first display portion 207SG029A, the second display portion 207SG029B, the third display portion 207SG029C, the fourth display portion 207SG029D repeats all lighting and all lights out of all segments (flashing))
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 4 of invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
The information display means displays the set value information without entering the full lighting display state (for example, when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition). As shown in FIG. 9-32, when the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029)
According to this feature, the set value can be confirmed quickly.

In addition, this embodiment also includes an invention 210SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a movable body confirmation operation based on a setting value change operation, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-189349, if the confirming operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is being changed, the operator may miss the confirming operation. Therefore, it is conceivable that the confirmation operation is executed again after the operation for changing the set value is completed. There is a problem that the movable body may perform an unintended movement because a new movement for confirming the movable body is started at the same timing. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
operably provided movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When a specific condition is established, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which setting values can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process),
The control means is
confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally; It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-49, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation from the timing of receiving the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing a checking operation by the checking operation control when shifting to the setting state, the checking operation control due to the completion of the setting state is not executed (for example, , As shown in FIG. 9-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command When the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Portion where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of invention 210SG,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
operably provided movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When the confirmation condition is established, the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started A portion where the CPU 103 executes set value confirmation processing when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally , and can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the first movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing are sequentially executed, and the setting value change end notification command and setting value confirmation A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirming state ends while the movable body is performing a confirming operation by the confirming operation control when shifting to the confirming state, the confirming operation control due to the completion of the confirming state is not executed (for example, , As shown in FIG. 9-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command When the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Portion where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not positioned at the predetermined origin position, a return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed in the confirmation operation. executable before executing the control, and
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process , the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after finishing the non-detection automatic operation control)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. Confirmation operation control by is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the first movable If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing is newly executed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed. part where body initialization processing is not executed) On the other hand, if the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed according to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, FIG. 9- As shown in 49 (B), the first movable body initialization processing based on the effect control CPU120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value check start notification command is completed, the second movable body initialization If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of processing, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly performed after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. and the part that executes sequentially)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the fifth aspect of invention 210SG,
comprising a plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first facial initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the confirmation operation has not been completed for all of the movable bodies, the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed satisfies a predetermined condition. Confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the Part where the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-49(B), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process is completed and a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is executed. After the end of the part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly executed in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

The characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the game information display portion 207SG200 is replaced with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the normal A pattern display 207SG020, a normal pattern reservation display 207SG025C, a round display 207SG131, a right-handed lamp 207SG132, a variable probability lamp 207SG133, and a time-saving lamp 207SG134 were exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, The game information display unit 207SG200 may or may not include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value check process (set value check state). 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are exemplified in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different manners depending on whether there is one or when the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is one or not.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the second The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although the form to be made different was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting mode) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, these first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol It is not necessary to light up some of all the segments that constitute the display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round indicator 207SG131 which are configured with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. 1 segment is lit, and all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B are exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131, blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and configuration of the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B Blinking of all segments to be performed may not be performed, or may be performed only partially.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit. is not limited to this, and unless the combination corresponds to the jackpot type shown in FIG. There may be.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the form of executing the notification of the set value abnormal error using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B was exemplified, but the present invention is based on this. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may be individually provided with an error notification LED, and the occurrence of the setting value abnormality error may be notified by lighting or blinking the LED.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form provided with the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value on the pachinko gaming machine 1 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The machine 1 may not be equipped with the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, it is sufficient to newly provide display means for displaying the setting values (or temporary setting values) in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is executed. Although the form of determining whether or not to execute has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute new first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, A mode for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by setting the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game, but this invention. is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round display, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game if it is possible to notify that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, A mode for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by setting the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, etc. in a different mode from that during the game, but this invention. is not limited to this, and the ``mode different from that during a game'' may include a different flashing cycle, a different brightness, a different light emission color of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value check start notification command. As the processing, an example has been exemplified in which the operation control when each movable body is not detected and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. From the time of receiving the command and the setting value confirmation start notification command, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command , actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by lighting or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right strike lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display section 207SG200) to explain that lighting and blinking are performed. By doing so, a store clerk or the like in a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko game machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being misidentified as a failure of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ;Y).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, FIGS. 9-53 (A) and 9-53 (B) 2, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the game state or set value.

In addition, if the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. , and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Further, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1237), and the small hit determination value The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the game state is a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit determination The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value standard value). Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set continuously in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-54, Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is varied according to the set value. It is sufficient to vary the jackpot probability according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. is the minimum value of the jackpot judgment value (in the example shown in FIG. 9-54, 64990 for setting value 1, 64974 for setting value 2, and 64954 for setting value 3). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is further varied by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is greater than or equal to 65208 which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result is judged without executing both the judgment of whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment of whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining the result of variable display can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the big hit determination value Common numerical range and common numerical range of small hit judgment value, If 2 to 6 are set as setting values in pachinko machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value and non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value Common numerical value range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. It can be determined whether to control to Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the big win game is played by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control to either the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the processing load to determine whether to control to the big hitting game state and the determination of whether to control to the small hitting game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-53, when the game state is controlled to the probability variable state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the jackpot reference value, and the increased jackpot determination value Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit determination value increases Since it is sufficient to determine whether to control, the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Also, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, the CPU 103 reduces the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is exemplified, but the present invention is this However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 9-55 and FIG. 9-56, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set to different numerical ranges.

In addition, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value ( The common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the non-common numerical range when the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6 (judgment included in the non-common numerical range In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the highest number of values), a numerical range that is continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in Figure 9-55, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 9-56, in any case The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the variation special figure, while the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value Although the number is exemplified in a different form, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same as.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set in the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. there is In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60000 as the standard value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is a big hit It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the set value. load can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state with 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, as with the characteristic portion 207SG described above, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value And in a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, it is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, the CPU 103 is the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning game state with 32767 as the small winning reference value, the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning game state of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, each set value is set. Although the form of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A common numerical range may be established. Incidentally, even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the same reference as in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56 The range from 1238, which is the value, to the value corresponding to each setting value may be set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be the smallest when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of , the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, if the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value On the other hand, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special figure, the CPU 103 determines that the variation special figure is the second Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1 special figure and the case of the 2nd special figure, whether to control to the small winning game state by the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but this invention It is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the big hit determination value or not common. It is determined whether or not to control to a big winning game state based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small winning determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the characteristic portion 207SG. It may be determined whether to control to a small hit game state or not. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control to the state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic part 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 10-1 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 10-1, the same processes as those in FIG. 9-32 are given the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-32 is performed.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the set value changing flag (207SGSa066). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-32 is performed.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing setting value confirmation processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 10-2, the same processing as in FIG. 9-33 is given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-33 is performed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off at 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes game stop end processing (10FS002). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set values on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-33 is performed.

(Regarding various timers)
Next, game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period of the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops clocking by these timers. These timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot gaming state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by using the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer is a V-variable game machine that controls the game state after the jackpot game is over based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid that is controlled to the open state and the closed state provided in front of the sensor that detects the V probability change. In the V probability variable gaming machine, the V cover is in an open state in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. Such a region where the V lid is open is called a V winning region. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by using the V lid open time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning to determine that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 controls the game ball that has passed through the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A game ball that has passed through the switch) is also determined as a V prize within the effective period. The CPU 103 counts the validity period of the V prize during which the V prize is determined to be valid by the V pass waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is in the closed state by an electric chew opening time timer. .

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of variable display of special symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the end of the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol variation time timer. The normal pattern fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of normal patterns. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which a fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that a big win is controlled at the start of a big win. The fanfare period is a period in which a fanfare performance is executed as a performance operation for announcing the start of the big win game state after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which an ending effect is executed, which is a period for reporting the end of the big win when the big win ends. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as a effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 has a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, etc. as timers other than the timers described above. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started by the special symbol variation stop period timer. The normal pattern fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next normal pattern is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started by the normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer.

(Game stop start process)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing the game stop start process in the feature part 10F. First, in the game stop start process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010). At 10FS010, if the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker release time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). At 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is operating (10FS012). At 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). At 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the V passage waiting time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). At 10FS014, if the electric chew opening time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the electric chew opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing is terminated. If the electric chew opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016). At 10FS016, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016; Y), the normal pattern fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017). At 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). At 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation (10FS019). At 10FS019, if other timers are in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timers in operation are stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the batting operation handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided at the starting gate, the general winning gate 10, the out gate, and the passage gate 41, a processing of disabling the detection of various errors, This includes processing for invalidating the payout of prize balls. Other processes (10FS021) invalidate various processes and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 10-4 is a flow chart showing the game stop end processing in the characterizing portion 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). At 10FS030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). At 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032). At 10FS032, if the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). At 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the processing is terminated.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034). At 10FS034, if the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is activated (10FS040), and the processing ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer being stopped is operated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). At 10FS036, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal pattern fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). At 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). At 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped (10FS039). At 10FS039, if other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the other timers that are stopped are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, processing to enable firing of the batting operation handle 30, processing to enable various sensors provided in the starting port, general winning port 10, out port, and passage gate 41, processing to enable detection of various errors, This includes processing for validating the payout of prize balls. Various processes are validated by the other process (10FS041), and the game is normally executed.

(Regarding the effects of characteristic parts)
As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 determines the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted from the setting confirmation state, and the game progresses. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the end. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the inter-round interval period in the setting confirmation state. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the game progressing due to the subtraction of the effective period of the V winning prize in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 determines the effective period of the electronic chew open time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. is stopped, and the effective period of the electric chew open time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is ready to enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. is stopped, and the counting of the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed. is stopped, and the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is resumed based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled while the fanfare effect is being executed, Based on the termination of the setting confirmation state, the fanfare time timer is restarted to count the validity period. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the fanfare effect and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state. .

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the ending time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled while the ending effect is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The timing of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention may be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 10F will be described below.

A gaming machine (so-called type 1 gaming machine) that shifts to a big win game state based on the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols has been described, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area has been described. A game machine (so-called type 2 game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the fact that a game ball wins (V prize) in a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied in a game machine (one type and two type mixing machine) that combines the When the starting winning to the second starting winning port is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the determination result of the big win is obtained, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the result of the big win display becomes the big win game. The game control similar to the big hit based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening, such as being controlled to the state is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit, the small hit determination is executed, and when the determination result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes a small hit game. A special variable winning ball device for a small hit is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by a special variable winning ball device for small winning in a small winning game state and the game ball enters a special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, variable for big winning. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-type jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, a small winning time timer may be provided for measuring the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small winning time timer is a winning within the effective period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning to the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small winning time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the small winning game state is set, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. , You may make it resume time-measurement of the effective period of a small hit time timer. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the small winning game state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of various timers based on control to the setting change state when the state is advantageous to the player, and stops various timers based on the termination of the setting change state. may be restarted.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbols results in a big win display result or a loss display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special design results in a big hit display, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed Based on the When the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special pattern is displaced and the display result is displayed, even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped. . In this manner, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player with respect to the big win display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, but the timer is stopped in order not to disadvantage the player with respect to the loss display result. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big win display result or a losing display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the loss display result, during the execution of the variable display of the loss, the pattern stop period was reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. Sometimes, it may be made to stop the special figure fluctuation stop period timer.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or the set value is disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, the various timers are started. You may choose not to stop.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and that can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to shift to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) multiple times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., interval period between rounds) (e.g., CPU 103 for timing by interval period timer between rounds),
The predetermined game timing means stops the timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) is controlled,
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 11F)
The characteristic portion 11F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew open time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
p The normal variable prize winning timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew open time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is set when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. is stopped, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the timer is restarted for the effective period of the electric chew opening time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) multiple times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) is controlled,
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 12F)
The characteristic portion 12F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Identification information (e.g., special design) variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display (e.g., CPU103 timed by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) multiple times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from the time the variable display of the identification information stops until the next variable display is started (for example, the CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer) is further provided,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is stopped. Resuming the timing of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started). Stop the timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restart the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the start of the next variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) is controlled,
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 13F)
The characteristic portion 13F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived; ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) multiple times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from the time the variable display of the identification information stops until the next variable display is started (for example, the CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer) is further provided,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is stopped. Resuming the timing of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started). Stop the timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restart the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the start of the next variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) is controlled,
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. Characteristic part 40F has the characteristic about the processing of the production control command during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Noise caused by static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, an effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 unintentionally. Processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating the effect control commands in the characteristic portion 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 11-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 9-8(A). The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of winning determination results such as jackpot type determination and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Among them, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will be made and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. Also, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results.

Various production control commands shown in FIG. 11-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103 . By receiving various production control commands, the production control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the production control CPU 120 based on the production control command will be explained.

(Regarding processing based on the variation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols, the image display device 5 may be provided with a regular small pattern in which the decoration pattern is reduced. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing variable display of the small symbols to be displayed at all times.

(Regarding processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As patterns to be displayed in a variable manner, a decorative pattern, a special pattern, and a fourth pattern may be provided as the fourth pattern next to the normal pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first and second special patterns) are fluctuating. Is displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body completely or partially occupies the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current variable display is being performed. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command, thereby performing the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(Regarding the processing based on the specified command during the opening of the big prize mouth)
During the jackpot game, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in an open state based on the reception of the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening.

(Regarding processing based on the first start winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first starting opening winning designation command, thereby the first suspension information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. display a hold indication corresponding to In addition, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second starting opening winning designation command, so that the second effect stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 Display a pending display corresponding to the pending information.

(Regarding processing based on symbol designation command and variation type designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a win-time flash effect and a win-time pending change effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The win-time flash effect is a effect in which the lamps provided around the first start opening are illuminated when a start-up win occurs. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for flash performance at the time of winning on the basis of the degree of expectation of a big hit based on hold information by a symbol designating command or a variation type designating command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control emits red light for a game with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, and emits white light for a game with a low degree of expectation. control is executed so that the lamp does not emit light. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a flash effect at the time of winning and a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only light is emitted and sound is not output.

The pending change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the usual mode. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a winning pending change performance on the basis of the degree of expectation for a big hit based on the pending information by a symbol designation command or a variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the pending display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, red, green, and blue are displayed in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit, and in the case of losing the lottery or a change in loss that does not involve reach, the suspension display is displayed in white in the normal mode. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation along with the winning pending change effect. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only the hold change does not output the sound.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. It should be noted that only one of the winning-time flash effect and the winning-time pending change effect may be executed. Also, when a prize is won, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting sound.

Next, the production control main processing executed in the characteristic portion 40F will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 40F. In FIG. 11-2, the same processing as in FIG. 9-43 is assigned the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is partially omitted. In FIG. 11-2, the processes related to 207SGS413-207SGS415 and 207SGS417-207SGS424 in FIG. 9-43 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process for notifying that an operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that a setting value is being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412). In the setting value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting change value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value related notification process in 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop the game. Processing is performed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412, and if the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y) goes to 207SGS427.

FIG. 11-3 is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic part 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command receiving buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command is received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command is received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby controlling the variable display of decorative patterns and the constant variable display of small patterns by operating the image display device 5. can be prevented from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning hole designation command is received. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the first pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning hole designation command is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying the second start winning opening has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the second pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received. If it is determined that the design designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the design designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby making it possible not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. Further, the effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby preventing execution of the winning pending change effect by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent execution of the pending change effect at the time of winning by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the test command is received. Here, the test command is a command that is sent directly to the effect control board 12 from a command sending device for checking the state of the screen and the state of the character that is provided in the game machine at the time of factory shipment. . When transmitting test commands, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to test command transmission is connected to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. If it is determined that the test command has been received, control according to the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this manner, processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, commands as shown in FIG. 11-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

(Regarding the effects of characteristic parts)
As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received when the setting change state is controlled. Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state, so that the variation pattern specification command Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting change state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open designation command even if it receives the special winning opening open designation command when it is controlled in the setting change state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open designation command even if it receives the special winning opening open designation command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting change state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting change state, so based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command like 40FS021. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning. Further, since information is not left by discarding the received command, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 11-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, setting is made to display an image notifying the setting change state, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. to display an image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set. In this way, it is possible to indicate that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5, etc. It is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 11-3, even when being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control according to the test command is executed. In this way, the operation of the predetermined rendering means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
Although the characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention may be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is established. For example, an initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the termination of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if the production control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the processing based on the production control command is not executed. explained. However, the processing based on the fact that the production control command is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image is visually displayed according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. As for the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the channel other than the channel for outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the received command is executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, when it is controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the winning lamp have been described as predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be anything as long as the effect control means 120 executes it based on the reception of the command. For example, an operation means operated by a player or a movable member provided in a game machine may be used as the predetermined presentation means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member moves due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if the command is executed, it is sufficient to execute control to discard the command.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can control not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 may be controlled to operate, a lamp provided in the game machine may emit light, or a sound may be output from a speaker. In such a case, when a command related to the lamp or speaker is received, the command may be discarded so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command has been described. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern The advance notice effect may be executed based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command should be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed. Then, various advance notices may not be executed by judging that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of actually judging whether or not the advance notice can be executed. Also, when executing a pre-reading notice effect in continuous variable display other than when winning a prize, a notice lottery is executed based on receiving a symbol designation command or a change type command during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has ended at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, once an irregular command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a restriction is imposed so as not to receive another irregular command thereafter. good.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
normal variable display means for variably displaying the normal identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area;
normal variable display timing means for timing a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information;
special variable display means capable of variably displaying the special identification information and displaying the result of the variable display;
special variable display timing means for timing a special variable display period during which special identification information is variably displayed;
a predetermined period clock means for timing a predetermined period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game ,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is permitted,
The interrupt processing is permitted after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interruption processing is permitted, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. The timing of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the change period is restarted;
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the period ends, and the timing of the normal variable display period is resumed when the setting confirmation state is finished,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the special variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end of the special variable display period, and the timing of the special variable display period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends,
The mode of the special variable display means is set to a mode different from the variable display result when being controlled to the setting confirmation state ,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the predetermined period is being counted, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is terminated. The timing of the predetermined period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the predetermined period is restarted.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images